User manual - EXZR700_EXZR710_EXZR750_M29_FA

ManualsBrandsCasio ManualsDigital CameraEX-ZR700

ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺭ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻛ

.ﺍﺬﻫ

CASIO

ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟ ﻙءﺍﺮﺷ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻙﺮﻜﺸﻧ

•.ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ ﻲﻓ ﺓﺩﺭﺍﻮﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻃﺎﻴﺘﺣﻻﺍ ﺓءﺍﺮﻗ ﻦﻣ ﺪﻛﺄﺗ ،ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ﻞﺒﻗ

• .

ﻼﺒﻘﺘﺴﻣ ﻪﻴﻟﺇ ﻉﻮﺟﺮﻠﻟ ﻦﻣﺁ ﻥﺎﻜﻣ ﻲﻓ ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﺑ ﻆﻔﺘﺣﺍ

• ﻰﻠﻋ ﻲﻤﺳﺮﻟﺍ

EXILIM

ﻊﻗﻮﻣ ﺓﺭﺎﻳﺰﺑ ﻢﻗ ،ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻬﺑ ﺔﺻﺎﺨﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻣﻮﻠﻌﻤﻟﺍ ﺙﺪﺣﺃ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻉﻼﻃﻺﻟ

http://www.exilim.com/

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

Summary of content (196 pages)

PAGE 1
‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍءﻙ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ CASIO‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ EXILIM‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪http://www.exilim.
PAGE 2
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪(NP-130‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ*‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ*‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫)‪(AD-C54UG/AD-C53U‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫*‪ ١‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﻻً!‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
PAGE 4
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪2.....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ! ‪3..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪9......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ‪10 .................................................................
PAGE 5
‫❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ‪) ......................................‬ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ(‪58 ......‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ‪) ................‬ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ(‪59 ......‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪60 .....(ART SHOT) ...................................................‬‬ ‫❚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺳﻢ ‪) ........... HDR‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ )ﺭﺳﻢ ‪62 ......((HDR‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‪63 ..........................................................
PAGE 6
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪) ................................................‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪99 .....(AF‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪) ...........................................‬ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‪100 ...‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪) ....................................................................‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ(‪101 ...‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ AF) ..............................‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪101 ...‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪) ................................................
PAGE 7
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪) ............................................................‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‪124 ...‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪) ..............................................................‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‪124 ...‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪) .............................................................‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪125 ...(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ‪) .....................................................................‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‪125 ...‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪) .......................................................
PAGE 8
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪) .........................................‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪156 ...‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ‪).............................................................‬ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ(‪157 ...‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪) .....................................‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪157 ...‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪158 ... (REC) ....................................................................... [r‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪158 ... (PLAY) ...............................................
PAGE 9
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.
PAGE 10
‫‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫]‪ : [6] [4] [2] [8‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ )ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ (AE‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 12
‫‪ .
PAGE 13
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ (DISP) [8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪(DISP) [8‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (179‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ART SHOT‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ‪ .
PAGE 15
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 28‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺃﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 16
‫ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ )‪ (NP-130‬ﻣﻦ ‪ CASIO‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺟﺰ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 18
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﺃﻗﺼﺎﻫﺎ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .
PAGE 19
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )‪.(2 ،1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫]‪[USB‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ )‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﻮء ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫)ﺿﻮء‪/‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ(‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(173‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫)ﺿﻮء ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 22
‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪٢٠١٥ ،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪15/7/10 3‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ ‪10/7/15 3‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ ‪7/10/15 3‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (23‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(109 ،32‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻓﻆ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺬﺭﺍﻋﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﻟﻌﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .
PAGE 28
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ً (.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪ P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 29
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺺ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺮﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ ،(CS‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ”‪.
PAGE 30
‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ )ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :(STD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪64‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :(FHD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪67‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :(HS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪67‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪...
PAGE 31
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(101‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(99‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(102‬‬ ‫– ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(87‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻮﺿﺎء ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 32
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.109‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ ،(CS‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.111‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ ،(CS‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.112‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ“ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”‪) “¥ SETTING‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(158‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [2‬‬ ‫( )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪ .
PAGE 34
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [2‬‬ ‫(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.“.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .
PAGE 35
‫‪ .‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(28‬‬ ‫‪ Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪.
PAGE 37
‫‪M‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) M‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) A‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) S‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫]‪[8] [2] [4] [6‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ‪*.
PAGE 39
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻃﺆ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫· ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ )ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ(‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺒﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜ ّﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻇﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻃﻼﻋﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .
PAGE 44
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(ISO) ISO‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ،(ISO‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻼ‬ ‫‪ISO80‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪(Make-up‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Make-up‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻄﻴﻒ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ Make-up‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪) 12+‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(“‪.‬‬ ‫”‪) 0‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(“‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ ،(Make-up‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ Make-up‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪(EV‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (EV‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ –2.0EV :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+2.0EV‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪1/3EV :‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ ،(EV‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫]‪ ،[8‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ .EV‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ EV‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [2‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫> ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻼ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫( ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫)ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‪.‬‬ ‫? ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.
PAGE 48
‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.193‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬ ‫ﻟﻴﻼ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﺰﺣﻴﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺄﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ HD‬ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪HD‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺺ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫)ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫)ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪.
PAGE 52
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻮﻫﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫)ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺯﻭﻭﻡ )‪ “(SR‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 53
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ )ﺯﻭﻭﻡ )‪((SR‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳ ٍﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻔ ّﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ )ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ (CS‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(53‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻊ ]‪) [j‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻧﺴﺠﺔ ﺭﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 55
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 56
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ CS‬ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﺪﻙ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.
PAGE 57
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪ .
PAGE 58
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ )ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ )ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ .
PAGE 59
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺯﻭﻭﻡ )‪ “(SR‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (53‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(100‬ﻟﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(100‬ﻟﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.
PAGE 61
‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ ART SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻊ ]‪.(ART SHOT) [C‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ :‬ﺭﺳﻢ ‪ HDR‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 62
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ً‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻊ ]‪) [D‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫)‪.(STD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(65‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :(FHD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪67‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :(HS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪67‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻊ ]‪) [P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫]‪) [Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪.(.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(28‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ FHD‬ﻭ‪ STD‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 66
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻀﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺩﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ (FHD‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ .‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ FHD‬ﻫﻲ ‪ ٩:١٦‬ﻭﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ‪ ١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﻮ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“r REC MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻊ ]‪) [P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪.(.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 68
‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ( ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺻﻐﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪HS1000‬‬ ‫‪ 1000‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬ ‫‪٦٤x٢٢٤‬‬ ‫‪HS480‬‬ ‫‪ 480‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬ ‫‪١٦٠x٢٢٤‬‬ ‫‪HS240‬‬ ‫‪ 240‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬ ‫‪٣٨٤x٥١٢‬‬ ‫‪HS120‬‬ ‫‪ 120‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬ ‫‪٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪HS30-240‬‬ ‫‪HS30-120‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ( ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 70
‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٨‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ‪) ‰‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟـ ‪(For YouTube) YouTube‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”‪ “For YouTube‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،YouTube‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ .YouTube, LLC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”‪ “For YouTube‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )‪ (STD‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (FHD‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(HS‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“r REC MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻊ ]‪.(BEST SHOT) [b‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 72
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٧‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ“ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 74
‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺪء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ )‪(CUSTOM SHOT‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ً ،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬ ‫”‪ .“CUSTOM SHOT‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”‪ “CUSTOM SHOT‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬ ‫”‪.“CUSTOM SHOT‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ‪A‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ‪S‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ‪M‬‬ ‫• ‪) BEST SHOT‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(“ ﻭ”‪ “For YouTube‬ﻭ”ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪(“HDMI‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 76
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ CUSTOM SHOT‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ“ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻊ ]‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ“‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ‪ ١٥‬ﻭ‪ ١٩‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﻢ )ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬ ‫‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ ١٩‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 79
‫‪.٨‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪.٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻂء‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻺﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ”‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻢ“ ﻭ”‪ ١٩‬ﻣﻢ“ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﻴﻢ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٩‬ﻣﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ(‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٦٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺃﺿﺨﻢ ﺑﻜﺜﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 82
‫‪.٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻂء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻪ )ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ .
PAGE 83
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺒﺘﺴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻄﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﻨﻴﻪ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻊ ]‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ )ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻃﺆ(‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﺎﻃﺆ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺠﻨﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ”ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻃﺆ“ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻃﺆ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﻟﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻃﺆ“‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 85
‫‪.٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣُﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪–0.4 sec.‬‬ ‫‪–0.3 sec.‬‬ ‫‪–0.2 sec.‬‬ ‫‪–0.1 sec.‬‬ ‫‪SHUTTER‬‬ ‫)‪(*٠٫٤‬‬ ‫)‪(*٠٫٣‬‬ ‫)‪(*٠٫٢‬‬ ‫)‪(*٠٫١‬‬ ‫)ﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ(‬ ‫* ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ‪ AF-CS‬ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺳﻬﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 87
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪) RAW‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪(RAW‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ *RAW‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”‪) “RAW‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(151‬‬ ‫* ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ (.DNG‬ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ً .‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ DNG‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 88
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) “ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(44‬‬ ‫ﻭ”ﺣﺪ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (98‬ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .
PAGE 89
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺧﺮﺝ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪(HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ ،٩:١٦‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً(‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪) HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻊ ]‪.(BEST SHOT) [b‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 90
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.116‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(118‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ )‪(REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (38‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫]‪[8] [2] [4] [6‬‬ ‫) ‪.
PAGE 92
‫‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫”ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.91‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“r REC MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ” ‪“r REC MENU‬‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪) [6‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪ /‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“r REC MENU‬‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪) [6‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ(‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [4‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪16M‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٤٥٦x٤٦٠٨‬‬ ‫‪3:2‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٠٧٢x٤٦٠٨‬‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬ ‫)‪(٢٥٩٢x٤٦٠٨‬‬ ‫‪10M‬‬ ‫)‪(٢٧٣٦x٣٦٤٨‬‬ ‫‪5M‬‬ ‫)‪(١٩٢٠x٢٥٦٠‬‬ ‫‪3M‬‬ ‫)‪(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨‬‬ ‫‪VGA‬‬ ‫)‪(٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“r REC MENU‬‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (128‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷ
PAGE 95
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪16M‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫”‪ “16M‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “10M‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 16:9 3:2‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ“‪ .
PAGE 96
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“r REC MENU‬‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫• ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺟﻴﺪ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﺮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺃﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﻛﺜﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻌﻘﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ( ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ(( ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬ ‫‪STD‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﺣﺪ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻼ‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫”ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) “ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(44‬‬ ‫‪ISO 200‬‬ ‫‪ISO 400‬‬ ‫‪ISO 800‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺣﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) “ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 99
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪(AF‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪AF‬‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ”‪ U‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ“ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪ š‬ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“r REC MENU‬‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“r REC MENU‬‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.
PAGE 103
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(50‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪(EV‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪EV‬‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.46‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ( ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪) ٢+‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪) ٢‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‬‫ً‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺣﺪّﺓ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺪّﺓ‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪) ٢+‬ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪﺓ( ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ٢-‬ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺣﺪﺓ(‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ‪(AF‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ‪AF‬‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﺎ ًء‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ ،2‬ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ ٢‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“r REC MENU‬‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺬﻛﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 32‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫»‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪(.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.
PAGE 110
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (127‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(156‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫]‪) [6] [4‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪(.
PAGE 111
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ (CS‬ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[6] [4‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 113
‫‪ .‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ )ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،([SET‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“p PLAY MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 115
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ )ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،([SET‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﺴﺦ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﺴﺦ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 116
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪ [SET‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻭﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ً .‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً(‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪) HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﺪﻋﻮ ًﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ”ﺧﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪) “HDMI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(89‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.
PAGE 118
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻃﺮﻑ ‪) HDMI‬ﺧﺮﺝ ‪(HDMI‬‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“¥ SETTING‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1080i‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪*1080i‬‬ ‫‪480p‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪480p‬‬ ‫‪576p‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪576p‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪ 1080i‬ﻣﻊ ‪ 1080 60i‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ .
PAGE 119
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )‪(PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 120
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :٥‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻸﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ٥‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﻋﺪﺍ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ“‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 121
‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ )ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪ :Windows 8 1‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬ ‫‪ :Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬ﺑﺪء ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪ :Windows XP‬ﺑﺪء ‪ 3‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ‪Macintosh‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 122
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“p PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 123
‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ… ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ “...‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘﺎً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 124
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“p PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ¤‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺥ ﺻﺎﻑ‬ ‫' ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﺟﺰﺋ ًﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ ﻭﻳﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺃﻣﻄﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫“ ﻇﻞ‬ ‫ﺿﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻇﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.
PAGE 125
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“p PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 133‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ )ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“p PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ›‪.
PAGE 126
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪CS‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ )ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،([SET‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ›‪.
PAGE 127
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ /‬ﻭﻗﺖ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ /‬ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“p PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫]‪[2] [8‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[6] [4‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻊ ”ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ”)‪ “am (pm‬ﻭ”‪) “24h‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﻫﺎ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 128
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“p PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻛﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ 10M :‬ﻭ‪ 3M‬ﻭ‪.VGA‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ٢:٣‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩:١٦‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ ٣:٤‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﻧﺴﺦ(‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“p PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .
PAGE 130
‫ﺩﻣﺞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪CS M‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“p PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻧﺸﺎء“‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ (٣٤٥٦x٤٦٠٨) 16M‬ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ ٥‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ‪ ٦ x‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ(‪.
PAGE 131
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ*‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ*‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 132
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.18‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ .USB‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺲ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪ .
PAGE 133
‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[SET‬ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ : DPOF‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[SET‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) DPOF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(133‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 134
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“p PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .٩٩‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ٠٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.
PAGE 135
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪CS‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ )ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،([SET‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ “DPOF‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 136
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،DPOF‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”‪ “٠٠‬ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻉ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪!DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺒﺎﺭﻫﻢ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ DPOF‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ .
PAGE 137
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ .(CIPA‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪PRINT Image Matching III‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫‪ PRINT Image Matching III‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ .
PAGE 138
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪...‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪(USB‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(143 ،139‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ )‪(Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(146‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.
PAGE 139
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪:‬‬ ‫‪،Windows 8‬‬ ‫‪،Windows 7‬‬ ‫‪،Windows Vista‬‬ ‫)‪Windows XP (SP3‬‬ ‫‪،Windows 8‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪139‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪Windows 7‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ،Windows Media Player 12‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 140
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“¥ SETTING‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”‪ “USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “Mass Storage‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 141
‫‪ .١١‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 8‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ”ﻟﺼﻖ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 7‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“ ”ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ“‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻟﺼﻖ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows Vista‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ“‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻟﺼﻖ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows XP‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ“ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ“‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻟﺼﻖ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ”‪) “DCIM‬ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‬ ‫)‪ (Windows Vista ،Windows 7 ،Windows 8‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ“ )‪ .
PAGE 142
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ‪ Windows 8‬ﻭ‪ ،Windows 7‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.Windows Media Player 12‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ QuickTime 7‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪http://www.apple.com/quicktime/‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 143
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪Macintosh‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬ ‫‪OS X‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ Macintosh‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪OS X‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،iPhoto‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪.Macintosh‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪OS X‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ OS X‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 10.4.11‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪QuickTime 7‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.
PAGE 144
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“¥ SETTING‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”‪ “USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “Mass Storage‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 145
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.151‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.
PAGE 146
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ .Macintosh‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ”‪.“STD‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻦ ‪.QuickTime‬‬ ‫– ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 147
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (154‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﻈﻬﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ‪.
PAGE 148
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(FlashAir) FlashAir‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ FlashAir‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.FlashAir‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ FlashAir‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 149
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ FlashAir‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”‪ “FlashAir‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (154‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ FlashAir‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :FlashAir‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪) Start with the control image :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ FlashAir‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪FlashAir‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 150
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(151‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺑﺄﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ CIMG0001‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 151
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪.(DCF) Design Rule for Camera File System‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪DCF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .DCF‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ‪ CASIO‬ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 152
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪DCF‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .DCF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .
PAGE 153
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )‪(SETTING‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.91‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(ECO‬‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“¥ SETTING‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ECO‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.
PAGE 154
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(Eye-Fi) Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“¥ SETTING‬‬ ‫‪Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(146‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(FlashAir) FlashAir‬‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“¥ SETTING‬‬ ‫‪FlashAir‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪) “Start with the control image‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ FlashAir‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”‪ “FlashAir‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ FlashAir‬ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 155
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ )ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“¥ SETTING‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(150‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻣﺜﻞ ”‪ “For eBay‬ﺃﻭ ”ﻣﺰﺍﺩ“ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫”‪ “For YouTube‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠّﺪﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠّﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.
PAGE 156
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴُﺎ )ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“¥ SETTING‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳًﺎ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.
PAGE 157
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ(‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“¥ SETTING‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ )ﺃﺧﻀﺮ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ٣٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪(.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 158
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪(REC) [r‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“¥ SETTING‬‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫‪REC‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [r‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 159
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ(‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“¥ SETTING‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﻃﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٦٢‬ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫”ﻣﺤﻠﻲ“‪.
PAGE 160
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ(‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“¥ SETTING‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[2] [8‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫]‪[6] [4‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ”)‪ “am (pm‬ﻭ”‪) “24h‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﻫﺎ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺪء ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ٢٠٠١‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.
PAGE 161
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(Language‬‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“¥ SETTING‬‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ”‪.“¥‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”‪.“Language‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 162
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪“¥ SETTING‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻷﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 163
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.
PAGE 164
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء )ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪.
PAGE 165
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ً .
PAGE 166
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ* ﻻﻧﺴﻜﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫"‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻧﺎء ﺯﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .
PAGE 167
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺴﻘﻮﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ً .‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﻦ ً‬ ‫ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 168
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺄﻱ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 169
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻛﺴﺮ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺸﻘﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﻟﺘﻬﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻤﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻤﻀﻤﻀﺔ ﻓﻤﻚ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺴﻜﺎﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻠﺪﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺷﻄﻒ ً‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 170
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 171
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﺵ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺰﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .
PAGE 172
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻯ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .
PAGE 173
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻷﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 174
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺰﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 175
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 23‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDHC‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDXC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻤﺪ‪ .
PAGE 176
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺗﻘﻚ‪ .‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺗﺨﺎﺫ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻚ ﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻄﻴﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 177
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ([MENU‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(162‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺔ )–( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 178
‫‪p PLAY MENU .‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ 30 :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ 3 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪MOTION PRINT‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ /‬ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪CS M‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪¥ SETTING .
PAGE 179
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫)‪ +‬ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ .
PAGE 180
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ”ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻡ“ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ”ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ“ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ‪.
PAGE 181
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻡ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(17‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻭﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪ CASIO NP-130‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.
PAGE 182
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(47‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺾ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 183
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻇﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(21‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪.
PAGE 184
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻮء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ DCF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 185
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(161 ،21‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(162‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .
PAGE 186
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ALERT‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫”ﺻﻮﺭ“‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺻﻮﺭ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (119‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .
PAGE 187
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(33‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 188
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪16M‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٤٥٦x٤٦٠٨‬‬ ‫‪3:2‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٠٧٢x٤٦٠٨‬‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬ ‫)‪(٢٥٩٢x٤٦٠٨‬‬ ‫‪10M‬‬ ‫)‪(٢٧٣٦x٣٦٤٨‬‬ ‫‪5M‬‬ ‫)‪(١٩٢٠x٢٥٦٠‬‬ ‫‪3M‬‬ ‫)‪(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨‬‬ ‫‪VGA‬‬ ‫)‪(٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ*‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪*SD‬‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ ١٠٫٧١‬ﻡ ﺏ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪١٠٧٢‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ ٥٫٥٧‬ﻡ ﺏ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫‪١٦٥٤‬‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ ٩٫٤٣‬ﻡ ﺏ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪١٢١٤‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ ٤٫٩٢‬ﻡ ﺏ‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪١٨٧٣‬‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪
PAGE 189
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ‪/‬ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ*‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪*SD‬‬ ‫‪FHD‬‬ ‫)‪(١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬ ‫‪HD‬‬ ‫)‪(٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ( *‬ ‫‪STD‬‬ ‫)‪(٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬ ‫‪HS1000‬‬ ‫)‪(٦٤x٢٢٤‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ(‬ ‫‪HS480‬‬ ‫)‪(١٦٠x٢٢٤‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ(‬ ‫‪HS240‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٨٤x٥١٢‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ(‬ ‫‪HS120‬‬ ‫)‪(٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ(‬ ‫‪HS30-240‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٨٤x٥١٢‬‬ ‫)ﺍ
PAGE 190
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ( ‪) /‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫)‪YouTube (FHD‬‬ ‫)‪(١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬ ‫)‪YouTube (STD‬‬ ‫)‪(٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬ ‫)‪YouTube (HS1000‬‬ ‫)‪(٦٤x٢٢٤‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ(‬ ‫)‪YouTube (HS480‬‬ ‫)‪(١٦٠x٢٢٤‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ(‬ ‫)‪YouTube (HS240‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٨٤x٥١٢‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ(‬ ‫)‪YouTube (HS120‬‬ ‫)‪(٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ(‬ ‫)‪YouTube (HS30-240‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٨٤x٥١٢‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫)‪YouTube (HS30-120‬‬ ‫)‪(٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪١
PAGE 191
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٦‬ﺝ ﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ .
PAGE 192
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ Exif) JPEG ،*(DNG) RAW‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪2.3‬؛ ‪ DCF 2.0‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ؛ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،MOV‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) IMA-ADPCM ،H.264/AVC‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬ ‫* ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ DNG‬ﻫﻮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻭﺗُﻮﺻﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪ Adobe Systems Incorporated‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻛﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.
PAGE 193
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺄﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺄﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪ –2.0EV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) +2.
PAGE 194
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ ٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 195
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪(NP-130‬‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ ١٨٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪) ٣٧٫٨‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪) ٤٤٫٨ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ١١٫٢ x‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ‬ ‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯﺓ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ ٣٨‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 196
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.